Upgrade to 7.1

47
Michael Klöffer, Active Global Support July, 2011 ALM 201 Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 7.1

Transcript of Upgrade to 7.1

Page 1: Upgrade to 7.1

Michael Kloumlffer Active Global Support

July 2011

ALM 201

Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 2

Disclaimer

This presentation outlines our general product direction and should not be relied on in making a

purchase decision This presentation is not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement

with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this presentation or to

develop or release any functionality mentioned in this presentation This presentation and SAPs

strategy and possible future developments are subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any

time for any reason without notice This document is provided without a warranty of any kind either

express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a

particular purpose or non-infringement SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this

document except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3

Agenda

SAP Solution Manager Landscape

bull Landscape Components

bull SLD LMDB

bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents

Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)

bull Post-Processing

Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

Lessons learned and more information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4

Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager

Run SAP

like a

Factory

Application

Lifecycle

Management

SingleSource of Truth

Integration

Validation

Solution Manager Landscape

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 2: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 2

Disclaimer

This presentation outlines our general product direction and should not be relied on in making a

purchase decision This presentation is not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement

with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this presentation or to

develop or release any functionality mentioned in this presentation This presentation and SAPs

strategy and possible future developments are subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any

time for any reason without notice This document is provided without a warranty of any kind either

express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a

particular purpose or non-infringement SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this

document except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3

Agenda

SAP Solution Manager Landscape

bull Landscape Components

bull SLD LMDB

bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents

Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)

bull Post-Processing

Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

Lessons learned and more information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4

Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager

Run SAP

like a

Factory

Application

Lifecycle

Management

SingleSource of Truth

Integration

Validation

Solution Manager Landscape

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 3: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3

Agenda

SAP Solution Manager Landscape

bull Landscape Components

bull SLD LMDB

bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents

Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)

bull Post-Processing

Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration

bull Roadmap

bull Preparation

Lessons learned and more information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4

Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager

Run SAP

like a

Factory

Application

Lifecycle

Management

SingleSource of Truth

Integration

Validation

Solution Manager Landscape

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 4: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4

Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager

Run SAP

like a

Factory

Application

Lifecycle

Management

SingleSource of Truth

Integration

Validation

Solution Manager Landscape

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 5: Upgrade to 7.1

Solution Manager Landscape

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 6: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6

Solution Manager Landscape Components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Managed System 1

ERP

Managed System 2

Enterprise Portal

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 7: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Client PC

Client PC Components

Access to the Solution Manager with

Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)

SAPGui

NetWeaver Business Client

For the different applications some plugin

components are needed

Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)

Adobe Flash

Java Runtime Environment

BMC Appsight BlackBox

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 8: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8

SAP Solution Manager

Components on the Managing System

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

LMDB SMSYSolar

Directory

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managing system components

SAP Solution Manager 71

Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)

Includes SAP Business Warehouse

Includes CRM 70

Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope

Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance

Possible sizing options

Installation of SAP BW on separate host

Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on

separate host

Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager

Concept

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 9: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9

SAP Solution Manager

Components On Managed System

Managed System

Diagnostics Agent

SAP Host Agent

J2EE

IS BC

Agent

ABAP

Local

SLD

Central SLD

Wily Host

Agent

J2EE

Command

Console

OS

Command

Console

ST-PI

ST-API

(Extractors)

Managed system components

Managed System

Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system

Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)

Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins

are needed

Agents amp Plugins

One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host

Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system

One SAP Host Agent per physical host

For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the

managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)

For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code

Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 10: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10

Logical Landscape View

SAP Solution Manager 71

SAP

Business

Warehouse

CA Wily

Introscope

Solar

DirectorySMSY LMDB

Workcenter

Data Stores

Repositories

Engines

Applications

EFWK CTS+ hellip

RCAService

DeskChaRM hellip

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

Managed System

Diagnostics

Agent

SLD

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 11: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11

SAP Solution Manager 71

SLD amp LMDB

Solution Manager 71

Local SLD

(use optional)

Central SLD

SMSY LMDB

LMDB implications in 71

Flexible landscape database based on the CIM

data model

No local SLD required anymore but supported

Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos

and LMDB

Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in

the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective

Solution Manager scenarios

With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of

technical systems is moved to LMDB

It is planned to move product systems and logical

componentsMigration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 12: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12

SAP Solution Manager 71

Outside Discovery amp LMDB

Host B

Host A

DB

IIS

Virt Host A1

Virt Host B1

SolMan Host

SLD

OS Info

OS Info

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent

SAP Host Agent

Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution

Manager

Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg

Databases amp Operating Systems

Microsoft components

Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent

Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents

SAP Solution Manager 71

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 13: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13

Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent

PhyHost2 PhyHost3

VHost1 VHost2VHost3

PhyHost1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

cluster

1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo

represented by a name physical or virtual

1 SAP HostAgent per physical host

1 agent per host supports several managed

systems running on the same named host

C7 C8

Diagnostics Agent

Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager

SAP HostAgent

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 1

SAP Host Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 2

Diagnostics

Agent 4

Diagnostics

Agent 3

SAP Host

Agent

Diagnostics

Agent 5

H

D1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 14: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14

Using a direct connection to the

message server

No additional configuration steps

necessary

Is primarily targeted for manual rollout

in small landscapes

Agent can be installed and connection

is available instantaneous

Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options

Using the SLD connection

(Agent Candidate Management)

Agent can be installed without having

access or credentials to the Solution

Manager system

Agent can be provided with new

connection data even when not

connected to the Solution Manager

system

Standard when agent is installed

together with SAP NetWeaver based

product

Connecting the agent to the Solution

Manager system can take up to 30

minutes

Recommendation Connect the agent during

the installation directly to the Solution

Manager but also enable the registration in

SLD to be able to use the extended

connection features (available with

Diagnostics Agent 720)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 15: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15

Required Agent Versions

Diagnostic Agent

bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)

bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager

bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from

httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION

MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems

SAP Host Agent

bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720

bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches

Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720

bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096

It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP

Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is

described in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 16: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16

Auto update SAP Host Agent

Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP

HostAgent

1 Host Agent checks regularly in the

subdirectory NEW for a new version

2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a

central file store

3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed

to the central share

4 If new installation files are detected in the

update directory the agent upgrades itself

and restarts

SAP Host Agent

usrsaphostctrlNEW

Regular Check for new

installation files

Central File Share per OS

Unpacked

SAPHOSTAGENTSAR

SymLink

More information on the

automatic update are provided

in SAP Note 1473974

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 17: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17

70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730

Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes

Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes

JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM

Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97

Support for SLD amp direct connection

(simultaneously)No No Yes

Yes (support offline

mode)

SSL Support No No Yes Yes

SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes

SAP Host Agent needed

Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior

to 70EhP1 SP20 using

local saposcolbinary)

Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed

updated)

Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655

Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions

Recommended

for new installations

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 18: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18

Typical Agent Layout

SAP Solution Manager Host

SAP Solution

Manager 71Wily

Introscope

Enterprise

Manager

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

SLD Host

SLD

J2EE

ABAP

Managed System Phyiscal Host 1

VHost1 VHost2

Enterprise Portal ERP

DAA 98

SAP Host

Agent

IS BC

Agent

DAB 99

IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 19: Upgrade to 7.1

Upgrade of SAP Solution

Manager

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 20: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20

Preparing for InstallationUpgrade

Installation How Upgrade

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide

Plan implementation of missing software components agent and

possible restarts for managed systems

Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability

Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71

Obtain the Installation Software

DVDrsquos or

servicesapcomsw

dc

Obtain the Upgrade Software

Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN

Update SLD Content to latest available version

Check the connection of managed systems to SLD

Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed

systems

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

servicesapcomsw

dc

Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems

(ST-API amp ST-PI)

Install Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

servicesapcomsw

dc + Guides

Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager

Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager

hosts

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

SOLMAN_SETUP

+ add guides

Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed

systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 21: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for all

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 22: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wiliy IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install

Diagnostics

Agent for DB

host and Wily

Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 23: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23

Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit

SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including

SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of

Managed Systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 24: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25

Check Prerequesites

Update SLD CR Content amp Model

LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one

connected SLD

bull CR Content latest available

bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available

To check open SLD

httpsldhostsldportsld

Go to Administration Details Data

Check Note 669669 for further

information on CR Content amp Model

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 25: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26

Installation amp Upgrade

Where To Find The Software

httpsservicesapcomswdc

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 26: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27

SAP Solution Manager 71

Installationupgrade roadmap

Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on

managed systems

Install Solution

Manager

Upgrade Solution

Manager Including

Wily IS EM

Download software from SMP

Perform Delta

Configuration with

Solman_setup

Repeat managed

Systems

configuration for PI

systems

Preparation

Upgrade Installation

Post Processing

Upgrade

SAPHostAgent on

all managed hosts

Install Diagnostics

Agent for DB host

and Wily Hosts

Perform Backup

Run Self-Diagnosis

Perform Basic

Configuration with

Solman_Setup

Install Wily IS EM

Install Diagnostics

Agent for All

managed Hosts

Perform managed

Systems

configuration with

SolMan_Setup

Install Diagnostics

Agent on Wily Hosts

Restart Java

Managed systems

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 27: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28

Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade

Java ABAP

upgrade runs in

parallel

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 28: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29

Upgrade Process Steps Details

Initialization

bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page

Extraction

bull The required software is extracted

Configuration

bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration

mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to

the enhancement package configuration file

Checks

bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also

checks some application-specific requirements

Preprocessing

bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of

this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap

step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration

modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the

Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts

Downtime

bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program

converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel

Postprocessing

bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities

Finalization

bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 29: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30

Installation

Installation is based on SAPinst

1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager

2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system

3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 30: Upgrade to 7.1

Performing Post-Upgrade

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 31: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32

SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP

SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration

Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP

Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager

Single easy to use wizard for system

preparation amp basic configuration

Highly automated configuration

Integrated documentation for each step

Easy access to open tasks and postponed

activities

Configuration of all managed systems

from one central entry point

Configuration of other scenarios like

Technical Monitoring Data Volume

Managementhellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 32: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33

Automatic Basic Configuration UI components

Help Section

Provides detailed information to

each step such as what needs to

be done and what will happen in

the background

Activities

Lists all single activities during

each step along with the

documentation for the IMG activity

Log

Shows detailed logs per activity

Navigation

Guided procedure with all steps for

the basic configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 33: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34

Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap

Prepares the system for the configuration

Needs to be performed fully after a new installation

After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the

appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)

System

Preparation

Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management

Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)

Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta

configuration

Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update

Basic

Configuration

Connection and configuration of managed systems

Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP

Solution Manager

Creation of Logical Components for managed systems

Managed

Systems

Configuration

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 34: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35

SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen

The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration

Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom

Which steps of the configuration needs an update

Check bdquoUpdate Needed

Flagldquo to see which activities

need to be reperformed

after a SP update

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 35: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36

The new roadmaphellip

hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can

decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete

procedure

Step was performed

successfully

Step was performed

with errors (check

and reexecution

needed)

Step was performed

with warnings

(check needed)

Step needs reexecution

because of changes in the

system (SP Update

configuration changeshellip)

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 36: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

System preparation New steps in 71

Automatic

Central

Correction

Note Check

Configuration

of needed

WebServices

Configuration

SLD amp LMDB

Connect SMD

agents to

Solution

Manager

Install and

configure

SAHostAgent

Configure

LMDB

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 37: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Basic Configuration New steps in 71

CUA Support for

all users

Support for Introscope

Installation over

Diagnostics Agent amp

Introscope User

Management

Configuration of

MailSMS for

Solution Manager

notification

95 of steps

(incl BI) are

now

automated

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 38: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system

types (incl selected 3rd party like

Websphere)

Technical Scenarios (multiple

systems like double stacks)

And standalone databases

Detailed Status overview

- RFC working

- Configuration status

- System well defined

- ST-API amp PI checks

Integration of LMDB

Technical System

maintenance

ABAPJAVA double stack

scenario are automatically

created

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 39: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40

SAP Solution Manager Configuration

Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71

Create and

check RFCs for

Managed

Systems

Assign SMD

Agents to Server

Name

All Users

managed by the

Wizard

CTS+ and DBA

cockpit support

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 40: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41

Upgrading to the new IT Service Management

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 41: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42

Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management

If the customer used only standard functionality

with standard customizing no manual upgrade

effort needed new customizing is delivered for

new transaction types

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 42: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43

New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service

Management in SolMan Setup

Copy of

transaction types

now automated in

SAP Solution

Manager 71 SP3

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 43: Upgrade to 7.1

Lessons learned and more

information

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 44: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45

Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp

RampUp

Start Landscape Planning early

Prepare a tracking list of managed systems

Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts

Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems

Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration

Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting

Check profile parameters after installation upgrade

On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 45: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome

Up to date information on setup and configuration

for SAP Solution Manager 71

bull Landscape Setup

bull SLD LMDB

bull Configuration Procedures

bull Troubleshooting Guides

bull hellip

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 46: Upgrade to 7.1

copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47

Additional Information

Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager

httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager

SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP

Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN

httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH

Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security

Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)

httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71

Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager 71

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom

Page 47: Upgrade to 7.1

Thank You

Contact information

Michael Kloumlffer

Service Architect

MichaelKloeffersapcom